LG LAD-9600 Owner’s Manual

‫‪LAD-M9600_ARABIC‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ‪LAD-9600 :‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻛﺘﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻛﺎﻣﻼ ﻭﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺮ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻔﺘﺢ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ( ﺣﻴﺚ ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﺇﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺺ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺫﻭ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻷﺿﻼﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﻄﺮ ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺰﻭﻝ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻷﺿﻼﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ )ﺧﺪﻣﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﺇﻻ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺁﻣﻨﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﺗﺸﺘﺖ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰﻙ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺑﻞ ﺭﻛﺰ ﺟﻴ ًﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ‪ .‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻻ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺁﻣﻨﺔ ﻭﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻌﺰﻳﺰﺍ ﻟﻠﺴﻼﻣﺔ؛ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺇﻻ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻌﺸﻴﻖ ﻣﻜﺎﺑﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﻮﻑ )ﺍﻟﻴﺪ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﺴﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪ 60 ~ 10 -‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ(‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻼ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻸﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺼﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﺘﺴﺎﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺫﺍﺫ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺮ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ؛ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻪ ﻟﺘﺼﺎﺩﻡ ﻗﻮﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻷﻥ ﻧﻈﺮﻩ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻫﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﻭﻗﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺩﺙ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﻛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ‪ 12‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻭﺗﺄﺭﻳﺾ ﺳﺎﻟﺐ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﺗﺮﻓﻴﻬﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﺭﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﻓﻠﺔ؛ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻮﻟﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻔﺎﺩﻳًﺎ ﻟﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ؛ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ E‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺩﻭﺭﻳًﺎ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻄﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺒﻠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺤﻮﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻟﻴﺰﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺟﺎء ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻫﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺧﻄﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺰﺭ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﺒﺔ‪ .،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﻟﻴﺰﺭ ﻣﺮﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺘﺤﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺤﺪﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪2-3‬‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪4-6‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪7-8‬‬ ‫‪9-19‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ‪9 .....................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪10 .............................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪10 ..........................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪11 ....................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪12 ...................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪12 .................................................................. .‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪13-15 ...............................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻓﻚ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ‪16 ..................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ‪16 ..............................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺧﻔﺎء ‪16 .............................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪17 .................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻓﻚ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‪17 .....................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪17 .............................................................................. ISO-DIN‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪18 .....................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪18 ..............................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺢ ‪ /‬ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪18 ..............................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪18 ..............................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻓﻘﻴًﺎ ‪18 .........................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﺮﺹ‪18 ......................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪19 .....................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪19 ....................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﺳﻜﺎﺕ )ﻹﺳﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ( ‪19 ..............................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ‪19 ....................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪) EQ‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻥ(‪19 ...........................................................................‬‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺝ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺧﻠﻔﻲ ‪20 .........................................REAR OUT‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ‪20 ....................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺝ‪20 ............................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪20 .............................................................................‬‬ ‫‪21-27‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪) SETUP‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‪21 ...............................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪21-22 ........................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪23-24 ......................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪24-25 ....................................................................................... DVD‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻮﻳﺔ ‪25 .............................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮ ‪26 ..................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪26 ...............................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ‪27 ...........................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪28-35‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ‪28 ...............................................................‬‬ ‫ﺑﺪء ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪28 ...........................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ‪28-30 ............................................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ‪30 .....................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪31 ..............................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‪31 .....................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ )ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‪31 .........................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ‪32 .................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪32-33 ..................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ )ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ(‪33 ..........................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ‪34 .....................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺑﺄﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪34 ...........................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ‪35 ..............................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ‪35 .........................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ‪35 ...........................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪36-39‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪36 .......................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪36 ....................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺅﻫﺎ‪36 ......................................................................‬‬ ‫‪37-39‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪CD/MP3/WMA‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻭﻗﺮﺹ ‪37 ................................................. MP3/WMA‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺎﺩﺓ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ‪37 ....................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺎﺩﺓ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ‪37 ...................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﺓ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ‪37 ........................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ‪37 .............................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪37 ...................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪38 ....................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ‪38 ............................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ‪38 ...........................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺢ‪38 ...............................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪39 ..........................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪40-43‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪DVD/VCD‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪40 ................................................................. DVD / VCD‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪40 .........................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ /‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ‪41 ....................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪41 .............................................................. .‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ‪41 .............................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪41 ...................................................... .‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ‪41 ............................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ /‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪41 ............................................................................ .VCD‬‬ ‫ﺑﺤﺚ ‪42 ..............................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺕ‪42 .............................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪42 ....................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪42 ............................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ‪43 .............................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪43 .......................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪44-46‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪DivX‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪44 ............................................................................ DivX‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ /‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‪45 .................................................................... .‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ‪45 ..............................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ‪45 .............................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ‪45 ............................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪45 ....................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ‪46 .............................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺕ‪46 .............................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪46 ....................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪47‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪47 .............................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪47 .....................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪48‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪48 ..............................................................................USB‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪48 ....................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻮﺏ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪49‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ‬ ‫‪50‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫‪51‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪52‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺧﻦ ﻟﻠﺪﻋﻢ‬ ‫‪53‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺮﻱ ﺃﻱ ﻗﺴﻢ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻧﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﺜﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪.‬‬ ‫‪DVD‬‬ ‫‪CD‬‬ ‫‪WMA‬‬ ‫‪DVD‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪WMA‬‬ ‫‪VCD‬‬ ‫‪MP3‬‬ ‫‪DivX‬‬ ‫ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪MP3‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪DivX‬‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ‪ DVD‬ﻭﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ؛ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ ً‬ ‫ﻓﺈﻥ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ؛ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‬ ‫‪DVD‬‬ ‫)ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ 12‬ﺳﻢ(‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ )‪(VCD‬‬ ‫)ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ 12‬ﺳﻢ(‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‬ ‫)ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ 12‬ﺳﻢ(‬ ‫ﻭﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﺮﺃ ‪ DVD±R‬ﻭ‪ DVD±RW‬ﻭ‪ CD-R‬ﺃﻭ ‪CD-RW‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ MP3‬ﺃﻭ ‪.WMA‬‬ ‫• ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪) CD-R/RW‬ﺃﻭ ‪ (DVD±R/±RW‬ﻧﻔﺴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪) CD-R/RW‬ﺃﻭ ‪.(DVD±R/±RW‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺘﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ )ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ(‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺷﺎﺫﺓ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺿﻼﻉ(‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻋﻄﻼ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﻭﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﻭﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺼﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﻭﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ً‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻤﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻳﺴﻘﻂ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺑﺈﻣﺴﺎﻛﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﺘﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﻍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻠﺼﻖ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺇﻟﺦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪8 cm‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ 8‬ﺳﻢ )ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ 12‬ﺳﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ(‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻧﻈﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻤﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻳﺒﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺤﻮﻝ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ‪ DVD‬ﻭﺗﺼﻨﻴﻌﻪ ﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻔﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ »‪.«2‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ »‪ «2‬ﺃﻭ »‪ «ALL‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫• ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻤﻌﻈﻢ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﺮﺋﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ‪ dvd‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ‪Car DVD‬‬ ‫‪ Receiver‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﻦ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺘﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺇﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫» ‪) «Check regional code‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪OPEN‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪DISP‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪TILT‬‬ ‫‪FLIP‬‬ ‫‪EJECT‬‬ ‫‪OPEN‬‬ ‫‪ARROW‬‬ ‫‪EQ‬‬ ‫‪PHONE‬‬ ‫‪SRS‬‬ ‫‪BAND‬‬ ‫‪RSE‬‬ ‫‪SRC‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪8 9 10‬‬ ‫‪VOL‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪19‬‬ ‫‪18‬‬ ‫‪15 16 17‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪.1‬‬ ‫‪FLIP‬‬ ‫‪DISP‬‬ ‫‪CLOSE‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻓﻘﻴًﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪FLIP‬‬ ‫‪) RSE .11‬ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ(‪TILT‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭﻳﻦ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻴﻦ ﻛﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻭﻣﺼﺪﺭ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.2‬‬ ‫‪TILT‬‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪BAND .12‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.3‬‬ ‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪.4‬‬ ‫‪DISP‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪SRS .13‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪.SRS‬‬ ‫‪.5‬‬ ‫‪OPEN/CLOSE‬‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻏﻼﻗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.6‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪.7‬‬ ‫‪) .VOL‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬ ‫• ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫• ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ(‬ ‫• ﺇﺳﻜﺎﺕ )ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ(‬ ‫‪.8‬‬ ‫‪) v/V/b/B ARROW‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪/‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ(‬ ‫• ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ )ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ(‬ ‫• ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ )ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪/‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ(‬ ‫‪BRIGHT‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺨﻄﻲ )ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ(‬ ‫‪WIDE‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺤﺚ )ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ(‬ ‫• ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ )ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ(‬ ‫• ﻗﺒﻮﻝ‬ ‫‪.9‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫‪PHONE .14‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪EQ .15‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .16‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬ ‫‪.17‬‬ ‫ﻟﻔﻚ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .18‬ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ‬ ‫ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪USB‬‬ ‫‪.19‬‬ ‫ﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) SRC .10‬ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ(‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪DISP‬‬ ‫‪OPEN‬‬ ‫‪FLIP‬‬ ‫‪TILT‬‬ ‫‪EJECT‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫‪OPEN‬‬ ‫‪EQ‬‬ ‫‪PHONE‬‬ ‫‪RDS‬‬ ‫‪ARROW‬‬ ‫‪BAND‬‬ ‫‪RSE‬‬ ‫‪TA/AF‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪CLOSE‬‬ ‫‪VOL‬‬ ‫‪SRC‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪TILT‬‬ ‫‪DISP‬‬ ‫‪FLIP‬‬ ‫‪BRIGHT‬‬ ‫‪WIDE‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪.1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪WIDE‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪DivX‬‬ ‫‪VCD‬‬ ‫‪DVD‬‬ ‫‪.2R‬‬ ‫‪+/- BRIGHT‬‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.3‬‬ ‫‪LCD‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ )ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ )ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺧﻔﺎء(‬ ‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﺗﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ×‪2‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ × ‪) 2‬ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻓﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ × ‪) 2‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺧﻔﺎء(‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ‪/‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺧﻔﺎء‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻏﻲ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ × ‪2‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﺗﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻏﻲ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ × ‪4‬‬ ‫)ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺧﻔﺎء(‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻏﻲ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ × ‪4‬‬ ‫)ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺧﻔﺎء(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫‪.4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ‪) v/V/b/B‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪/‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ(‬ ‫• ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ )ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ(‬ ‫• ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ )ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪/‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ(‬ ‫• ﺗﺨﻄﻲ )ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ(‬ ‫• ﺑﺤﺚ )ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ(‬ ‫• ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ )ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ(‬ ‫‪.5‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪9‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻣﺮﻗﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻅ )‪.(1-6‬‬ ‫‪REPEAT‬‬ ‫• ﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪WMA‬‬ ‫‪MP3‬‬ ‫‪CD‬‬ ‫‪SHUFFLE‬‬ ‫• ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪CD‬‬ ‫‪SCAN‬‬ ‫• ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭﻝ ‪ 10‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪AUDIO‬‬ ‫• ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪DivX‬‬ ‫‪DVD SUBTITLE‬‬ ‫• ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪DVD ANGLE‬‬ ‫• ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ DVD‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.6‬‬ ‫‪BAND‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ‪ FM‬ﻭ)‪.MW(AM‬‬ ‫‪.7‬‬ ‫‪DISC MENU‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪.DVD‬‬ ‫‪.8‬‬ ‫‪RETURN‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻣﻊ ‪.PBC‬‬ ‫‪.9‬‬ ‫‪VOLUME‬‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪.1‬‬ ‫‪POWER‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪SOURCE‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) RSE‬ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭﻳﻦ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻴﻦ ﻛﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻭﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.2‬‬ ‫‪?m M? SKIP‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ )ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ(‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪m M SCAN‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺜﻲ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ )ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪x STOP B PLAY X PAUSE‬‬ ‫‪.3‬‬ ‫‪DVD SEARCH‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪MUTE .10‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻜﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﻠﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺑﻘﻠﻢ ﺭﺻﺎﺹ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻠﻢ ﻛﺮﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻲ ‪ +‬ﻭ ‪ -‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺻﺎﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﻛﺮﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻪ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻪ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻻ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ )‪ 3‬ﻓﻮﻟﻂ( ‪.CR2025‬‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺳﻴﺘﺮﻙ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻃﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺄﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺴﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ؛ ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭﻧﻈﻔﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪OPEN‬‬ ‫‪TILT‬‬ ‫‪DISP‬‬ ‫‪FLIP‬‬ ‫‪EJECT‬‬ ‫‪RESET‬‬ ‫‪RESET‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ؛ ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) RESET‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ( ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻗﻠﻢ ﻛﺮﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻬﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫* ‪OPTICAL OUT‬‬ ‫)ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ)ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ‪ /‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﻲ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪) DIMMER‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﻡ(‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺃﺻﻔﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻓﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺼﻬﺮ ‪ 5‬ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﺭﺿﻲ )‪(-‬‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )‪(+‬‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫‪ ١٢+‬ﻓﻮﻟﻂ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺣﺎﺟﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ؛ ﺭﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻓﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺧﻔﺎء‬ ‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﺗﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ )ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺧﻔﺎء(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‬ ‫* ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺼﺮﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻤﻀﺨﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻘﻨﺎﺗﻲ ﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪/‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻚ ﺷﻔﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﺻﻔﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﺯﺭﻕ‪/‬ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )‪(+‬‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫‪ +12‬ﻓﻮﻟﻂ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﺭﺿﻲ )‪(-‬‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‬ ‫)ﻓﺮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﻮﻑ ]ﺍﻟﻴﺪ[(‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﺸﻴﻖ ﻣﻜﺎﺑﺢ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ‬ ‫)ﻣﻜﺎﺑﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﻮﻑ( ﻟﻠﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍ ﺩﺙ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﺯﺭﻕ‬ ‫‪REMOTE ON‬‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺨﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪TO IGNITION‬‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﻣﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.ACC‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﻧﻔﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﻨﻲ‬ ‫‪REVERSE GEAR‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ؛ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻠﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‪ .‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫‪(15‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺃﺧﻀﺮ‪/‬ﺃﺳﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‪/‬ﺃﺳﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺃﻳﺴﺮ‬ ‫)ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺃﻳﻤﻦ‬ ‫)ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬ ‫ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﺠﻲ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺃﺧﻀﺮ‪/‬ﺃﺳﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﻨﻔﺴﺠﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﻀﺮ‬ ‫ﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺃﻳﺴﺮ‬ ‫)ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬ ‫ﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺃﻳﻤﻦ‬ ‫)ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪ISO‬؛ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ‬ ‫‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫‪) REAR OUT‬ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺧﻠﻔﻲ(‬ ‫‪) AUDIO‬ﺻﻮﺕ(‬ ‫)‪(VIDEO IN‬‬ ‫‪) PRE-OUT‬ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ‬ ‫)ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ(‬ ‫‪) AUX IN‬ﻣﺪﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ(‬ ‫‪CAM‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪VCR‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺗﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ؛ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺷﺒﻚ ﺳﻠﻚ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺷﺒﻚ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣًﺎ ﺯﺭﺩﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﺗﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫‪OPEN‬‬ ‫‪DISP‬‬ ‫‪P‬‬ ‫‪TILT‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫‪EJECT‬‬ ‫‪ARROW‬‬ ‫ﻓﻚ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫‪EQ‬‬ ‫‪PHONE‬‬ ‫‪RDS‬‬ ‫‪BAND‬‬ ‫‪RSE‬‬ ‫ﻣﻐﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻓﻚ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ‪TA/AF‬‬ ‫ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﻚ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ؛ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﺧﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﻛﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪VOL‬‬ ‫‪SRC‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‘‘ ’’ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺿﻊ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻜﻮﻛﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪CLOSE‬‬ ‫‪TILT‬‬ ‫‪DISP‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻖ ﺑﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺧﻔﺎء )ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻌﺪ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ(‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻏﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺑﻄﻮﻝ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻛﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﻱ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻏﻲ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‬ ‫‪NAVI‬‬ ‫‪MENU‬‬ ‫‪NAVI‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻍ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫‪WIDE‬‬ ‫‪FLIP‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ؛ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﻓﻚ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺗﻔﺎﺩﻳًﺎ ﻟﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﻣﺎﺱ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.1‬‬ ‫‪.2‬‬ ‫‪.3‬‬ ‫‪.4‬‬ ‫ﻓﻚ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻛﺐ ﻛﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻮ ﺍﻷﺳﻨﺎﻥ ﺣﺴﺐ‬ ‫ﺳﻤﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻠﻮﻩ‬ ‫ﻓﻚ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻠﻮﻩ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ؛ ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﻓﻚ‬ ‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﺭ ‪ A‬ﺍﻉ ﺃ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻔﺬ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻭﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻛﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪ISO-DIN‬‬ ‫‪.1‬‬ ‫‪.2‬‬ ‫‪.3‬‬ ‫‪.4‬‬ ‫‪.5‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪.ISO-DIN‬‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻏﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻜﻮﻛﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻠﻮﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻛﺐ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻠﻮﻩ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻛﺐ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪17‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫‪FLIP‬‬ ‫‪TILT‬‬ ‫‪ARROW‬‬ ‫‪RSE‬‬ ‫‪SRC‬‬ ‫‪RSE‬‬ ‫‪SRC‬‬ ‫‪RSE‬‬ ‫‪SRC‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫‪VOL‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ‪) .‬ﻣﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ‪) DISP‬ﻋﺮﺽ( ﺃﻭ ‪) EJECT‬ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ((‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.VOL‬‬ ‫‪OPEN‬‬ ‫‪TILT‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺢ ‪ /‬ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪DISP‬‬ ‫‪FLIP‬‬ ‫‪TILT‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) OPEN/CLOSE‬ﻓﺘﺢ‪/‬ﺇﻏﻼﻕ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺘﻢ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻏﻼﻗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪FLIP‬‬ ‫‪EJECT‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪EQ‬‬ ‫‪TILT‬‬ ‫‪PHONE‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪FLIP‬‬ ‫‪RDS‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪TA/AF‬‬ ‫‪BAND‬‬ ‫‪ARROW‬‬ ‫‪RSE‬‬ ‫‪VOL‬‬ ‫‪SRC‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻣﺎﻟﺔ ‪ TILT‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫‪ARROW‬‬ ‫‪VOL‬‬ ‫‪CLOSE‬‬ ‫‪TILT‬‬ ‫‪ARROW‬‬ ‫‪TILT‬‬ ‫‪DISP‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺘﺤﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺩﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪TILT‬‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻓﻘﻴًﺎ‬ ‫‪FLIP‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﺐ ‪.FLIP‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻭﺗﻌﻴﻖ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻴﻒ؛‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻓﻘﻴًﺎ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ؛ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ FLIP‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪VOL‬‬ ‫‪FLIP‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺻﺪﻭﺭ ﺻﺎﻓﺮﺓ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪10‬‬ ‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﺮﺹ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻭﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً‪.‬‬ ‫‪FLIP‬‬ ‫‪TILT‬‬ ‫‪18‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪NAVI‬‬ ‫‪MENU‬‬ ‫‪NAVI‬‬ ‫‪WIDE‬‬ ‫‪FLIP‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫‪OPEN‬‬ ‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻗﺮﺹ‬ ‫‪EJECT‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ‪.EJECT‬‬ ‫ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪OPEN‬‬ ‫‪DISP‬‬ ‫‪DISP‬‬ ‫‪TILT‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫‪FLIP‬‬ ‫‪NE‬‬ ‫‪EQ‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺝ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪ 10‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ؛ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪EJECT‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ ‪ VOL‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪EQ‬‬ ‫‪PHONE‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫‪SRS‬‬ ‫‪ARROW‬‬ ‫‪BAND‬‬ ‫‪SRC‬‬ ‫‪RSE‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ؛ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ؛ ﻓﺈﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻅ‪.‬‬ ‫‪OPEN‬‬ ‫‪VOL‬‬ ‫‪CLOSE‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪DISP‬‬ ‫‪TILT‬‬ ‫‪DISP‬‬ ‫ﺇﺳﻜﺎﺕ )ﻹﺳﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ(‬ ‫‪CLOSE‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ ‪ VOL‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﻷﻱ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ؛ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪DISP‬‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ‪EJECT‬‬ ‫)ﻣﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ‪ TILT‬ﺃﻭ ‪ FLIP‬ﺃﻭ )‪ OPEN(CLOSE‬ﺃﻭ ‪(EJECT‬‬ ‫‪TILT‬‬ ‫‪FLIP‬‬ ‫‪ARROW‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‬ ‫‪EQ‬‬ ‫‪PHONE‬‬ ‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ SRC‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪FM t DISC t USB t VIDEO t AUX‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ‬ ‫‪RDS‬‬ ‫‪OPEN‬‬ ‫‪BAND‬‬ ‫‪LIP‬‬ ‫‪DISP‬‬ ‫‪RSE‬‬ ‫‪VOL‬‬ ‫‪SRC‬‬ ‫‪TA/AF‬‬ ‫‪EJECT‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪) EQ‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻥ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ EQ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫‪DISP‬‬ ‫‪CLOSE‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪FLAT t POP t CLASSIC t ROCK tJAZZ t‬‬ ‫‪VOCAL t SALSA t SAMBA t USER t WOW‬‬ ‫• ‪POP‬‬ ‫‪ :‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﺭ ﻭﺑﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻨﺘﺮﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ : CLASSIC‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻻﻭﺭﻛﺴﺘﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ROCK‬‬ ‫‪ :‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺭﺩ ﺭﻭﻙ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﻴﻔﻲ ﻣﻴﺘﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪JAZZ‬‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﻗﻮﻱ ﻭﺷﻌﻮﺭ ﻧﺎﻋﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ : VOCAL‬ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻴﺔ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪SALSA‬‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺼﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ : SAMBA‬ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻣﺒﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪USER‬‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪WOW‬‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻬﻮﺭﻱ ﻣﻌًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.(SRS‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪SRS Labs, Inc‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪BRIGHT‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ WOW‬ﺑﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪.SRS Labs, Inc‬‬ ‫‪WIDE‬‬ ‫‪19‬‬ ‫‪EQ‬‬ ‫‪PHONE‬‬ ‫‪TILT‬‬ ‫‪CLOSE‬‬ ‫‪RDS‬‬ ‫‪TA/AF‬‬ ‫‪FLIP‬‬ ‫‪DISP‬‬ ‫‪NAVI‬‬ ‫‪MENU‬‬ ‫‪NAVI‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺝ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺧﻠﻔﻲ ‪REAR OUT‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭﻳﻦ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻴﻦ ﻛﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻭﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﻟﻠﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﻘﻮﺍﺑﺲ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺧﻠﻔﻲ ‪.REAR OUT‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‬ ‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ RSE‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪RSE DVD t RSE USB t RSE VIDEO t RSE AUX‬‬ ‫• ‪RSE DVD‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪RSE USB‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪RSE VIDEO‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻘﻮﺍﺑﺲ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪.VIDEO IN‬‬ ‫• ‪RSE AUX‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻘﻮﺍﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻲ ‪.AUX IN‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺝ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.RSE‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ‪RSE OFF‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ؛ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﻮﻑ ﺍﻟﻀﻴﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﻘﺎﺑﺲ ‪REAR‬‬ ‫‪ OUT CAM‬ﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻭﺱ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ؛ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺧﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪) SETUP‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺗﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.SETUP‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪) Language‬ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪) Setback‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻒ ً‬ ‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪) Yes‬ﻧﻌﻢ(‪ :‬ﻟﺘﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪) No‬ﻻ(‪ :‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪) Adjust Picture‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ B‬ﺃﻭ ‪ b‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ B‬ﺃﻭ ‪ b‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪) Adjust Dimmer‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﻡ(‬ ‫‪) Auto Dimmer control‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺘﺎﻡ(‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﻡ ﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻴﻞ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪) Yes‬ﻧﻌﻢ(‪ :‬ﻟﺘﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪) No‬ﻻ(‪ :‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪21‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪BG Animation‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻤﺴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻫﻮ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪Clock‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) Summer time‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ(‬ ‫• ‪) On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ :‬ﻟﺘﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪) Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ :‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) Setting Clock‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ V‬ﺃﻭ ‪ v‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪) Rear Camera‬ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ(‬ ‫• ‪) On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﺸﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪) Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ :‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫‪22‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪) SOUND‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬ ‫• ‪) Balance/Fader‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺨﻔﻮﺕ(‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) Left‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺃﻭ ‪) Right‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ – ﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) Front‬ﺃﻣﺎﻡ( ﺃﻭ ‪) Rear‬ﺧﻠﻒ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻔﻮﺕ – ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪Woofer‬‬ ‫‪) Output Level‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ B‬ﺃﻭ ‪ b‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Cut-off Frequency‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ‪ 80/120/160‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺑﻨﻘﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻼ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ :‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪SRS WOW‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )‪.(10 ~ 1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ B‬ﺃﻭ ‪ b‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪SRS‬‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻬﻮﺭﻱ ﻣﻌًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ : FOCUS‬ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻇﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ : TruBass‬ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﻮﺭﻱ ﻟﻴﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪SRS Labs, Inc‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫• ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ WOW‬ﺑﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪.SRS Labs, Inc‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪) User Equalizer‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ(‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ V‬ﺃﻭ ‪ v‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪High Pass Filter‬‬ ‫ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻫﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺘﻔﻀﻴﻼﺗﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪23‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪) Rear Speaker‬ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ(‬ ‫‪) On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ :‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪) Beep‬ﺻﺎﻓﺮﺓ(‬ ‫‪) Beep Pattern‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﺮﺓ(‬ ‫• ‪) Long Key‬ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ(‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ؛‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﺎﻓﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪) All‬ﺍﻟﻜﻞ(‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﺎﻓﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) Beep Volume‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﺮﺓ(‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﺮﺓ‪) High/Medium/Low .‬ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ‪/‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‪/‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ(‬ ‫‪DVD‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪) DVD Language‬ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ(‬ ‫‪) Audio Language‬ﻟﻐﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ؛ ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) Subtitle Language‬ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ(‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ؛ ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻐﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ OFF‬ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ؛ ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻐﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 50‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪24‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪Aspect Ratio‬‬ ‫‪Wide‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﻋﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ‪) 16:9‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪Letter Box‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﻋﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ‪) 4:3‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ؛ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻄﺎﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Panscan‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﻋﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ‪.4:3‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ؛ ﻻ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻄﺎﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩﺍﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻟﻦ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪) Lock‬ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﺬﻟﻚ؛ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻞ؛ ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮ؛ ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ ﺑﺄﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ‪.9 – 0‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪.8 - 1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ OFF‬ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬ ‫• ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﻬﺎ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻺﺻﺪﺍﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺖ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ؛ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ‬ ‫‪.0000‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺴﻴﺎﻥ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ”‪ ،“210499‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫)ﺃﻭﻻ ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.(DVD‬‬ ‫‪25‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮ‬ ‫‪.1‬‬ ‫‪.2‬‬ ‫‪.3‬‬ ‫‪.4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Password‬‬ ‫ﺍﻛﺘﺐ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺑﺄﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ‪.9 – 0‬‬ ‫ﺃﻛﺪ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺑﺄﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ‪.9 – 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‘‘‪ ’’Enter‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ V‬ﺃﻭ ‪ v‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ٥٠‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ END‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬ ‫• ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺖ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ؛ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ‬ ‫‪.0000‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻨﺲ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪) DivX Registration‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪(DivX‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪﻙ ﺑﺮﻣﺰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪) DivX® VOD‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ( ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺄﺟﻴﺮ ﻭﺷﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪.DivX® VOD‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ‪visit www.divx.com/vod‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﺸﺮﺍء ﺃﻭ ﺗﺄﺟﻴﺮ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ®‪Divx‬‬ ‫‪ VOD‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺐ ‪.www.divx.com/vod‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻟﻠﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪26‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪) SOURCE‬ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺗﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.SOURCE‬‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ‬ ‫‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪FM/MW‬‬ ‫• ‪DVD/CD‬‬ ‫‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪SETUP‬‬ ‫‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.SETUP‬‬ ‫• ‪USB‬‬ ‫‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪VIDEO IN‬‬ ‫‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻘﻮﺍﺑﺲ ﺩﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪.VIDEO IN‬‬ ‫• ‪AUX‬‬ ‫‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻘﻮﺍﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻲ ‪.AUX IN‬‬ ‫• ‪ : SOURCE OFF‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ SRC‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪27‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺪء ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪OPEN‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻮﻗﻮﻓﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ؛‬ ‫‪TILT‬ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪FLIP.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ - .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪51‬‬ ‫‪DISP‬‬ ‫‪CLOSE‬‬ ‫‪TILT‬‬ ‫‪DISP‬‬ ‫‪FLIP‬‬ ‫‪EJECT‬‬ ‫‪E‬‬ ‫‪ARROW‬‬ ‫‪EQ‬‬ ‫‪EQ‬‬ ‫‪CLOSE‬‬ ‫‪PHONE‬‬ ‫‪RDS‬‬ ‫‪BAND‬‬ ‫‪RSE‬‬ ‫‪PHONE‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪VOL‬‬ ‫‪SRC‬‬ ‫‪SRS‬‬ ‫• ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻫﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻭﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺠﻬﺎ؛ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫‪VOL‬‬ ‫‪ARROW‬‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ‪SRC‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ‪RSE‬‬ ‫‪BAND‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻳﻔﻲ ﺑﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫‪ Bluetooth Hand-free‬ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺩﻓﻊ‬ ‫‪Profile‬‬ ‫‪1.0‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ‪Object Push Profile 1.1‬؛ ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻟﻜﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻗﺪ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭﻷﻥ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻲ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ؛ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺳﺌﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪TILT‬‬ ‫‪DISP‬‬ ‫‪FLIP‬‬ ‫ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ PHONE‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.SETUP‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺯﺭ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪.Connect Phone‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪.CONNECT PHONE‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ‪.Search‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ‪ Searching‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ‪ 20‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎء؛ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.CANCEL‬‬ ‫‪ .5‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ‪SEARCH‬‬ ‫‪.RESULT‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬ ‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ؛ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﺮﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫‪ visible to all devices‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ‪.Visibility‬‬ ‫ﻭﺇﻻ؛ ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺠﺢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻟﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫‪.CONNECT PHONE‬‬ ‫ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ؛ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺑﺤﺚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪28‬‬ ‫‪BRIGHT‬‬ ‫‪WIDE‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫‪ .6‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ؛ ﻳﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‬ ‫‪ INPUT PIN CODE‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ‪) .‬ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻫﻮ‬ ‫‪(1324‬‬ ‫ﻟﻨﺠﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ؛ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻭﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .7‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ ،9 ~ 0‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﻛﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .8‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Enter‬ﻹﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .9‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻧﺠﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ‬ ‫‪.CONNECT PHONE‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬ ‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﻧﺠﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ؛ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪.PHONE‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ‘ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ’ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻟﻪ ﺳﺠﻞ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻧﺠﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻭﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪ CONNECT PHONE‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ Auto Connection‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪.INFORMATION‬‬ ‫‪ -‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 31‬ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪29‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫ﺷ ّﻐﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ PHONE‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.2‬‬ ‫‪.3‬‬ ‫‪.4‬‬ ‫‪.5‬‬ ‫‪.6‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.SETUP‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺯﺭ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪.Connect Phone‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪.CONNECT PHONE‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻫﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺇﻻ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫‪.CONNECT PHONE‬‬ ‫ﻧﻔﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ‪Searching a Bluetooth‬‬ ‫‪ device‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﻭﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ؛ ﻳﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‬ ‫‪.INPUT PIN CODE‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬ ‫• ﻟﻨﺠﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ؛ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻭﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫‪.connecting through the unit‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ‪Hands-free‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪connection‬؛ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪ PHONE‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻤﺤﺎﺩﺛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺗﻴﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ؛ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺘﻴﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﺎ »ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ« ﻭ«ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ«‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻻ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ؛ ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ؛ ﻓﺎﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ؛ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪30‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫‪) SETUP‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪) Connect Phone‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪) BT Information‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) CONNECT PHONE‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ(‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪) Search‬ﺑﺤﺚ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪) Edit‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪.INFORMATION‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪) Info‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ(‬ ‫ﻭ‪) Delete‬ﺣﺬﻑ( ﻭ‪) Cancel‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪.INFORMATION‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪) .Info‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ(‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪.INFORMATION‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪) Delete‬ﺣﺬﻑ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪) Cancel‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء(‬ ‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪INFORMATION (CONNECT PHONE‬‬ ‫)ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ]ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ[(‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪) Auto Connection‬ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪ CONNECT PHONE‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪ Auto Connection‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪.INFORMATION‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪) Manual Connection‬ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪ CONNECT PHONE‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ‪ Manual Connection‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪.INFORMATION‬‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻷﺣﻮﺍﻝ؛ ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪.CONNECT PHONE‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ 6‬ﻫﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪31‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫‪) BT Informtion‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪) Rename‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪) End‬ﺇﻧﻬﺎء(‬ ‫ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪) Show/Hide‬ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ‪ /‬ﻋﺮﺽ(‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﻔﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻞ‬ ‫• ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) PHONE BOOK‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ‪) Phone‬ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ( ﺃﻭ ‪Home‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ( ﺃﻭ ‪) Office‬ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ(‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪) Search‬ﺑﺤﺚ(‬ ‫ﺍﻛﺘﺐ ﺟﺰءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 32‬ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ )ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ(‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪) Add‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻻﺕ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ‘‪.’...waiting‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪) Telephone No. Item Transmission‬ﻧﻘﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﺗﻒ( ﻓﻲ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ؛ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪) .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻨﻊ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪ Sending the phone number‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.‬‬ ‫‪32‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪) Delete All‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪) Edit‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪.INFORMATION‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪) Info‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ(‬ ‫ﻭ‪) Delete‬ﺣﺬﻑ( ﻭ‪) Cancel‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪.INFORMATION‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤًﺎ؛ ﻓﺎﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻲ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪INFORMATION (PHONE BOOK‬‬ ‫)ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ]ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ[(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻼﺳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﻼﺳﻢ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺭﻗﻢ؛ ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﺣﺪﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ؛ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﻨﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﻗﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪33‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻃﺮﻕ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﻛﺘﺐ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻣﺤﺎﺩﺛﺘﻪ؛ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ SEND‬ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ؛ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎء ‪.END‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ SEND‬ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺁﺧﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺳﺠﻞ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ(‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺑﺄﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ؛ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪SEND‬‬ ‫ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ‪ ،10‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 10‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ SEND‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ‪ ،10‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪0‬‬ ‫ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪34‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ؛ ﻳﺮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪.CALL FROM‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Accept‬ﻟﻠﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻣﻮﺟﻮ ًﺩﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻅ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺇﻥ ﻭﺟﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻓﺾ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ؛ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ‬ ‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺭﻓﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺴﺠﻞ ﻵﺧﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪.SEND‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫‪n‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ؛ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻣﻼ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻞ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺃﻱ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫‪35‬‬ ‫‪FLIP‬‬ ‫‪TILT‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪ARROW‬‬ ‫‪PHONE‬‬ ‫‪RDS‬‬ ‫‪TA/AF‬‬ ‫‪BAND‬‬ ‫‪RSE‬‬ ‫‪SRC‬‬ ‫‪VOL‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ SRC‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ BAND‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪FM1 t FM2 t FM3 t AM‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻟﻔﺔ ﺍﻵﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ?‪ M‬ﺃﻭ ‪.?m‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻟﺤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ‪FLIP‬‬ ‫‪TILT‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻗﻮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻟﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ M‬ﺃﻭ ‪ m‬ﻟﺤﻴﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪) AS (Auto Scan‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺃﻗﻮﻯ ‪ 6‬ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ )‪ FM1‬ﻭ‪ FM2‬ﻭ‪ FM3‬ﻭ‪ (AM‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.AutoScan‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻗﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎء‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺅﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 6‬ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺋﻬﺎ ً‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻘﺎ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ )‪ FM1‬ﻭ‪ FM2‬ﻭ‪ FM3‬ﻭ‪ (AM‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ M‬ﺃﻭ ‪ m‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ )‪.(6 – 1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ 2‬ﻭ‪ 3‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ؛ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ )‪.(6 – 1‬‬ ‫‪NAV‬‬ ‫‪WIDE‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 18‬ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ‪ FM‬ﻷﻥ ‪ FM1‬ﻭ‪ FM2‬ﻭ‪FM3‬‬ ‫ﻟﻬﺎ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪36‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪CD/MP3/WMA‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻭﻗﺮﺹ ‪MP3/WMA‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻭﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ MP3/WMA‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬ ‫‪ CD-ROM‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ CD-R‬ﺃﻭ ‪CD-RW‬‬ ‫)‪ DVD-ROM‬ﺃﻭ ‪ DVD-R‬ﺃﻭ ‪ DVD+R‬ﺃﻭ ‪ DVD-RW‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪.(DVD+RW‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ MP3 /WMA‬ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪ 48 - 16‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ)‪، (MP3‬‬ ‫‪ 44.1 – 8‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ )‪(WMA‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ‪ /‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ‪ 320 - 8‬ﻙ ﺏ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ )‪) (MP3‬ﻳﺸﻤﻞ ‪(VBR‬‬ ‫‪ 160 - 5‬ﻙ ﺏ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ )‪(WMA‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﻱ ﻟﻠﻘﺮﺹ ‪ CD-R/CD-RW‬ﻫﻮ ”‪ISO‬‬ ‫‪“9660‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ MP3/WMA‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻻ ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ‪) FILE SYSTEM‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ(‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ”‪ ،“Direct-CD‬ﻓﻠﻦ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪.MP3/WMA‬‬ ‫ﻭﻧﺤﻦ ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ”‪ ،“Easy-CD Creator‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺸﺄ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻳﺰﻭ ‪.9660‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼء ﺃﻥ ﻳﻼﺣﻈﻮﺍ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ MP3 /WMA‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻻ ﺗﻤﺘﻠﻚ ﺷﺮﻛﺘﻨﺎ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﻟﻤﻨﺢ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺎﻟﻚ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺎﺩﺓ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ?‪ M‬ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺎﺩﺓ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ?m‬ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪ 3‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﺓ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ?m‬ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ 4‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺤﺚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ M‬ﺃﻭ ‪ m‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺗﺮﻛﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫‪WMA‬‬ ‫‪MP3‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ B‬ﺃﻭ ‪ b‬ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪37‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪CD/MP3/WMA‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ‪. MP3 WMA‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ LIST‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺒﺪﺃ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ؛ ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫‪) REPEAT‬ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Repeat‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Off t Track... CD‬‬ ‫‪Off t One t Folder... MP3 WMA‬‬ ‫• ‪ : Track‬ﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ : One‬ﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ : Folder‬ﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ : Off‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) SHUFFLE‬ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Shufﬂe‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Off t On... CD‬‬ ‫‪Off t Folder... MP3 WMA‬‬ ‫• ‪ : On‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ : Folder‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ : Off‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪SCAN‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Scan‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Off t On... CD‬‬ ‫• ‪ : On‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭﻝ ‪ 10‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ : Off‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪38‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪CD/MP3/WMA‬‬ ‫‪) INFORMATION‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Information‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺤﺘﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ؛ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪CD TEXT/‬‬ ‫‪.ID3 TAG‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ‪CD TEXT‬؛ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ )ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﺓ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ‪ID3 TAG‬؛ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ )ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﺴﻴﻂ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪) ID3 TAG‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪39‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪DVD/VCD‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪DVD / VCD‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻟﻠﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ”‪) “Disc reading‬ﺟﺎﺭ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ(‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.B‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺑﻀﻊ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺣﻴﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮ ‘‘ ’’ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ؛ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻪ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻭﻟﺖ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﺃ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺭﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ VCD‬ﻟﻪ ‪PBC‬؛ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ‪ PBC‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪Video 2.0‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ‪. DVD‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ V‬ﺃﻭ‪ v‬ﺃﻭ ‪ B‬ﺃﻭ ‪ b‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ :‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ :‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ENTER‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ‪. VCD .‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ‪ ،9 ~ 0‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﻛﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ :‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ :‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ :‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ENTER‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪40‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪DVD/VCD‬‬ ‫‪) Play‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ B‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) Stop‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ x‬ﻟﻺﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) Pause‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ(‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ** ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.B‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ?‪ M‬ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ?m‬ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪ 3‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ?m‬ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ 4‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺤﺚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ M‬ﺃﻭ ‪ m‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‬ ‫)×‪.(100× ،16× ،8× ،6× ،4× ،2‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ ،VCD‬ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪(16× ،8× ،4× ،2×) :‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.B‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪DVD‬‬ ‫‪ /‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪VCD‬‬ ‫‪VCD‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺮﺩ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻮﻗﺔ ﻭﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﻓﺼﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.MENU (VCD MENU‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ B‬ﺃﻭ ‪ b‬ﺃﻭ ‪ V‬ﺃﻭ ‪ v‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ENTER‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ : ENTER‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪ /‬ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪41‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪DVD/VCD‬‬ ‫ﺑﺤﺚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ‪.Search‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ‪ ،9 ~ 0‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﻛﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫)‪(TITLE/CHAPTER/TIME‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ :‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ :‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬ ‫‪) AUDIO‬ﺻﻮﺕ(‬ ‫ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Audio‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ؛ ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻐﺔ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪DVD‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪) SUBTITLE‬ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ‪DVD‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Subtitle‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ؛ ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻐﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) ANGLE‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ(‬ ‫ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Angle‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ؛ ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪DVD‬‬ ‫‪42‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪DVD/VCD‬‬ ‫‪) REPEAT‬ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ REPEAT‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Off t Chapter t Title... CD‬‬ ‫‪Off t Track t All ... MP3 WMA‬‬ ‫• ‪) Chapter‬ﻓﺼﻞ(‪ :‬ﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪) Title‬ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ(‪ :‬ﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪) Track‬ﻣﺴﺎﺭ(‪ :‬ﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪) All‬ﺍﻟﻜﻞ(‪ :‬ﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪) Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ :‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ؛ ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪ DVD/CD‬ﻛﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ؛‬ ‫ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪.DVD‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 41‬ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪43‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪DivX‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪DivX‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻟﻠﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ”‪) ” Disc reading‬ﺟﺎﺭ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.B‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ DivX‬ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ DivX‬ﺗﺤﺖ ‪) 720x576‬ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ x‬ﻃﻮﻝ(‬ ‫ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ‪ DivX‬ﻃﻮﻟﻪ ‪ً 40‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻓﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ ،DivX‬ﻓﺴﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻛﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫” _ ” ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺯﺍﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻦ ‪ 30‬ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﺑﻤﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﻛﻼﻫﻤﺎ ﻣﻌﺎً‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ DivX‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪avi، .mpg، .mpeg :‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫)‪- SubRip(*.srt/*.txt‬‬ ‫)‪- SAMI(*.smi‬‬ ‫)‪- SubStation Alpha(*.ssa/*.txt‬‬ ‫)‪- MicroDVD(*.sub/*.txt‬‬ ‫)‪- SubViewer 1.0(*.sub‬‬ ‫)‪- SubViewer 2.0(*.sub/*.txt‬‬ ‫)‪- TMPlayer(*.txt‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪“DIVX3.xx”, “DIVX4.xx”, “DIVX5.xx”, “XVID”,‬‬ ‫‪“MP43”, “3IVX”.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫”‪“Dolby Digital”, “PCM”, “MP3”, “DTS‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ :‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ‪ 8-48‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ )‪،(MP3‬‬‫‪ -‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ‪ :‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ‪ 320 - 8‬ﻙ ﺏ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ )‪(MP3‬‬ ‫‪44‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪DivX‬‬ ‫‪) Play‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ B‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) Stop‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ x‬ﻟﻺﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) Pause‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ(‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ** ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.B‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ?‪ M‬ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ?m‬ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺤﺚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ M‬ﺃﻭ ‪ m‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ )×‪،2‬‬ ‫×‪.(16× ،8× ،6× ،4‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ LIST‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ )ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ(؛ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪45‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪DivX‬‬ ‫‪) REPEAT‬ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ REPEAT‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Off t One t Folder t All...‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ : One‬ﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ : Folder‬ﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) All‬ﺍﻟﻜﻞ(‪ :‬ﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ :‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) AUDIO‬ﺻﻮﺕ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Audio‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ؛ ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻐﺔ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) SUBTITLE‬ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Subtitle‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ؛ ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻐﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪46‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪.JPG‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺃﺳﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ )ﺃﻭ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ(‪ .‬ﻭﻛﻞ ﻟﻤﺴﺔ ﺗﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ 90‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺯﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ JPG‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻞء ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﻔﺸﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺟﺪﺍً‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮﻳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣًﺎ ﻭﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺎ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪.JPG‬‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪ : JPG‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻻ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ‪ 2‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺑﻤﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ‬ ‫‪) 3840 × 5120‬ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ( ﺃﻭ ‪) 1536 × 2048‬ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ(‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪47‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪USB‬‬ ‫‪CLOSE‬‬ ‫ﺻﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪USB‬؛ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ‪ USB detected‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺒﺪﺃ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.B‬‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ USB‬ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ LIST‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ )ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ(؛ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻔﺼﻞ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪ MP3‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.USB‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺭﺉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ 999‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎً‪.‬‬ ‫‪48‬‬ ‫‪DISP‬‬ ‫‪FLIP‬‬ ‫‪TILT‬‬ ‫‪EJECT‬‬ ‫‪ARROW‬‬ ‫‪EQ‬‬ ‫‪PHONE‬‬ ‫‪RDS‬‬ ‫‪BAND‬‬ ‫‪RSE‬‬ ‫‪SRC‬‬ ‫‪VOL‬‬ ‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻋﻄﺎﻝ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ‬ ‫• ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺼﻬﺮ ﺗﺎﻟﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺗﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺼﻬﺮ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻪ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺼﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻤﻜﻨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻣﺘﺴﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍءﺗﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺗﺨﻂ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﺤﻜﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪49‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪/‬ﻟﻐﺔ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪/‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺑﺨﺎﺯﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻓﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﺮﻳﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻟﺒﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﻬﺮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺭﻣﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﻣﻴﺰﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻤﺎﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺫﺭﺑﻴﺠﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺸﻜﻴﺮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺳﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻐﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺗﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻬﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺘﻮﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻐﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻼﺭﻭﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻮﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺗﻼﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺳﻴﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻭﺍﺗﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻴﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻧﻤﺎﺭﻛﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﻮﻟﻨﺪﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻧﺠﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺳﺒﺮﺍﻧﺘﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻮﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﻭﺯﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫‪6566‬‬ ‫‪6565‬‬ ‫‪6570‬‬ ‫‪8381‬‬ ‫‪6577‬‬ ‫‪6582‬‬ ‫‪7289‬‬ ‫‪6583‬‬ ‫‪6588‬‬ ‫‪6590‬‬ ‫‪6665‬‬ ‫‪6985‬‬ ‫‪6678‬‬ ‫‪6890‬‬ ‫‪6672‬‬ ‫‪6682‬‬ ‫‪6671‬‬ ‫‪7789‬‬ ‫‪6669‬‬ ‫‪7577‬‬ ‫‪6765‬‬ ‫‪9072‬‬ ‫‪6779‬‬ ‫‪7282‬‬ ‫‪6783‬‬ ‫‪6865‬‬ ‫‪7876‬‬ ‫‪6978‬‬ ‫‪6979‬‬ ‫‪6984‬‬ ‫‪7079‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺠﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻠﻨﺪﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻧﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻳﺴﻴﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻏﻠﻴﺸﻴﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻟﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻧﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺟﺮﻳﻦ ﻻﻧﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻮﺍﺭﺍﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺟﺎﺭﺗﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻭﺳﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻳﺴﻠﻨﺪﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻧﺪﻭﻧﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻳﺮﻟﻨﺪﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻳﻄﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻓﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻧﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺸﻤﻴﺮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺯﺍﺧﺎﺳﺘﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻏﻴﺰﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﻭﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺗﻴﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺗﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫‪7074‬‬ ‫‪7073‬‬ ‫‪7082‬‬ ‫‪7089‬‬ ‫‪7176‬‬ ‫‪7565‬‬ ‫‪6869‬‬ ‫‪6976‬‬ ‫‪7576‬‬ ‫‪7178‬‬ ‫‪7185‬‬ ‫‪7265‬‬ ‫‪7387‬‬ ‫‪7273‬‬ ‫‪7285‬‬ ‫‪7383‬‬ ‫‪7378‬‬ ‫‪7365‬‬ ‫‪7165‬‬ ‫‪7384‬‬ ‫‪7465‬‬ ‫‪7487‬‬ ‫‪7578‬‬ ‫‪7583‬‬ ‫‪7575‬‬ ‫‪7589‬‬ ‫‪7579‬‬ ‫‪7585‬‬ ‫‪7679‬‬ ‫‪7665‬‬ ‫‪7686‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻨﺠﺎﻻ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻭﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺎﻻﺟﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﻴﺰﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺎﻻﻳﺎﻻﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﻄﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺭﺍﺛﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﺪﻭﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻧﻐﻮﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻭﺭﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻴﺒﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺮﻭﻳﺠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺠﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺷﺘﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻮﻟﻨﺪﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻐﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﻮﻳﺘﺸﻮﺍ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻳﺘﻮ ﺭﻭﻣﺎﻧﻴﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻭﻣﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻣﺴﻮﻳﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺴﻜﺮﻳﺘﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻜﺘﻠﻨﺪﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻭﺍﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﻧﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺪﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫‪7678‬‬ ‫‪7684‬‬ ‫‪7775‬‬ ‫‪7771‬‬ ‫‪7783‬‬ ‫‪7776‬‬ ‫‪7784‬‬ ‫‪7773‬‬ ‫‪7782‬‬ ‫‪7779‬‬ ‫‪7778‬‬ ‫‪7865‬‬ ‫‪7869‬‬ ‫‪7879‬‬ ‫‪7982‬‬ ‫‪8065‬‬ ‫‪8083‬‬ ‫‪7065‬‬ ‫‪8076‬‬ ‫‪8084‬‬ ‫‪8185‬‬ ‫‪8277‬‬ ‫‪8279‬‬ ‫‪8285‬‬ ‫‪8377‬‬ ‫‪8365‬‬ ‫‪7168‬‬ ‫‪8382‬‬ ‫‪8372‬‬ ‫‪8378‬‬ ‫‪8368‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻐﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻓﺎﻛﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻓﻴﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﻣﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺣﻴﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻳﺪﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺟﺎﻟﻮﺝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺟﻴﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻣﻴﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺗﺮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻴﻠﻮﺟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻳﻠﻨﺪﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺘﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺠﺮﻳﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻧﺠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﻛﺮﺍﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﺯﺑﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺘﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻻﺑﻴﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻳﻠﺰﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻟﻮﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻛﺴﻮﺯﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﺸﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻴﻮﺭﻭﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻟﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫‪8373‬‬ ‫‪8375‬‬ ‫‪8376‬‬ ‫‪8379‬‬ ‫‪6983‬‬ ‫‪8385‬‬ ‫‪8387‬‬ ‫‪8386‬‬ ‫‪8476‬‬ ‫‪8471‬‬ ‫‪8465‬‬ ‫‪8484‬‬ ‫‪8469‬‬ ‫‪8472‬‬ ‫‪6679‬‬ ‫‪8473‬‬ ‫‪8479‬‬ ‫‪8482‬‬ ‫‪8475‬‬ ‫‪8487‬‬ ‫‪8575‬‬ ‫‪8582‬‬ ‫‪8590‬‬ ‫‪8673‬‬ ‫‪8679‬‬ ‫‪6789‬‬ ‫‪8779‬‬ ‫‪8872‬‬ ‫‪7473‬‬ ‫‪8979‬‬ ‫‪9085‬‬ ‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻓﻐﺎﻧﺴﺘﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻨﺘﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﻟﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺴﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﺠﻴﻜﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺗﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﻟﻴﻔﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﺯﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺒﻮﺩﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﺷﻴﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻛﻮﻟﻮﻣﺒﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻮﻧﻐﻮ‬ ‫ﻛﻮﺳﺘﺎ ﺭﻳﻜﺎ‬ ‫ﻛﺮﻭﺍﺗﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻬﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻴﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻧﻤﺎﺭﻙ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻛﻮﺍﺩﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻔﺎﺩﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫‪AF‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫‪AU‬‬ ‫‪AT‬‬ ‫‪BE‬‬ ‫‪BT‬‬ ‫‪BO‬‬ ‫‪BR‬‬ ‫‪KH‬‬ ‫‪CA‬‬ ‫‪CL‬‬ ‫‪CN‬‬ ‫‪CO‬‬ ‫‪CG‬‬ ‫‪CR‬‬ ‫‪HR‬‬ ‫‪CZ‬‬ ‫‪DK‬‬ ‫‪EC‬‬ ‫‪EG‬‬ ‫‪SV‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻴﻮﺑﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺠﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﻨﻠﻨﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻧﺴﺎ‬ ‫ﺃﻟﻤﺎﻧﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻳﻄﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﻈﻤﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻧﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺟﺮﻳﻦ ﻻﻧﺪ‬ ‫ﺟﺰﺭ ﻫﻴﺮﺩ ﻭﻣﺎﻛﺪﻭﻧﺎﻟﺪ‬ ‫ﻫﻮﻧﺞ ﻛﻮﻧﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺪﻭﻧﻴﺴﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﺇﺳﺮﺍﺋﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻄﺎﻟﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﺟﺎﻣﺎﻳﻜﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻨﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻮﻳﺖ‬ ‫ﻟﻴﺒﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﻛﺴﻤﺒﻮﺭﺝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫‪ET‬‬ ‫‪FJ‬‬ ‫‪FI‬‬ ‫‪FR‬‬ ‫‪DE‬‬ ‫‪GB‬‬ ‫‪GR‬‬ ‫‪GL‬‬ ‫‪HM‬‬ ‫‪HK‬‬ ‫‪HU‬‬ ‫‪IN‬‬ ‫‪ID‬‬ ‫‪IL‬‬ ‫‪IT‬‬ ‫‪JM‬‬ ‫‪JP‬‬ ‫‪KE‬‬ ‫‪KW‬‬ ‫‪LY‬‬ ‫‪LU‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺰﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﺪﻳﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺴﻴﻚ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻧﺎﻛﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻐﻮﻟﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻐﺮﺏ‬ ‫ﻧﻴﺒﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻫﻮﻟﻨﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﺟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﻧﺘﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﻟﻨﺪﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻴﻮﺯﻳﻠﻨﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﻧﻴﺠﻴﺮﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺮﻭﻳﺞ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻛﺴﺘﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﻨﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺭﺍﺟﻮﺍﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺒﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﻟﻨﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻐﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﻣﺎﻧﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺳﻴﺎ ﺍﻻﺗﺤﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪50‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫‪MY‬‬ ‫‪MV‬‬ ‫‪MX‬‬ ‫‪MC‬‬ ‫‪MN‬‬ ‫‪MA‬‬ ‫‪NP‬‬ ‫‪NL‬‬ ‫‪AN‬‬ ‫‪NZ‬‬ ‫‪NG‬‬ ‫‪NO‬‬ ‫‪OM‬‬ ‫‪PK‬‬ ‫‪PA‬‬ ‫‪PY‬‬ ‫‪PH‬‬ ‫‪PL‬‬ ‫‪PT‬‬ ‫‪RO‬‬ ‫‪RU‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻠﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﻮﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻐﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺳﻨﻐﺎﻓﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻬﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﺳﻠﻮﻓﺎﻛﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﺳﻠﻮﻓﻴﻨﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﺟﻨﻮﺏ ﺃﻓﺮﻳﻘﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﻛﻮﺭﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺠﻨﻮﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺒﺎﻧﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻳﻼﻧﻜﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻳﺴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﺎﻳﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﺎﻳﻼﻧﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻏﻨﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻛﺮﺍﻧﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺭﻭﺟﻮﺍﻱ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺯﺑﻜﺴﺘﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺘﻨﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺯﻳﻤﺒﺎﺑﻮﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫‪SA‬‬ ‫‪SN‬‬ ‫‪SG‬‬ ‫‪SK‬‬ ‫‪SI‬‬ ‫‪ZA‬‬ ‫‪KR‬‬ ‫‪ES‬‬ ‫‪LK‬‬ ‫‪SE‬‬ ‫‪CH‬‬ ‫‪TW‬‬ ‫‪TH‬‬ ‫‪TR‬‬ ‫‪UG‬‬ ‫‪UA‬‬ ‫‪US‬‬ ‫‪UY‬‬ ‫‪UZ‬‬ ‫‪VN‬‬ ‫‪ZW‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫• ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻳﻔﻲ ﺑﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ‪Bluetooth Hand-free‬‬ ‫‪ Profile 1.0‬ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ‪Object Push Profile 1.1‬؛ ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻟﻜﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻗﺪ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭﻷﻥ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻲ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ؛ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺃﻱ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺌﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ‬ ‫‪Nokia‬‬ ‫‪Samsung‬‬ ‫‪Motorola‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ‬ ‫‪3230‬‬ ‫‪6021‬‬ ‫‪6230‬‬ ‫‪6680‬‬ ‫‪6630‬‬ ‫‪8800‬‬ ‫‪N70‬‬ ‫‪SGH-Z500‬‬ ‫‪SGH-E7700‬‬ ‫‪SGH-D600‬‬ ‫‪SPH-V6900‬‬ ‫)‪L6 (L7‬‬ ‫‪V3‬‬ ‫‪E1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ‬ ‫‪Sony Ericsson‬‬ ‫‪Siemens‬‬ ‫‪LG‬‬ ‫‪51‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ‬ ‫‪W810i‬‬ ‫‪K700i‬‬ ‫‪K750i‬‬ ‫‪V800‬‬ ‫‪SL75‬‬ ‫‪SP65‬‬ ‫‪U8210‬‬ ‫‪U8290‬‬ ‫‪M4410‬‬ ‫‪KU730‬‬ ‫‪KG800‬‬ ‫‪P7200‬‬ ‫‪S5200‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ‪ 50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬ﻭﺍﻁ × ‪ 4‬ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ )ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ(‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ‪ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ‪ 12‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪Ω 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺭﻳﺾ ‪ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬ﺳﺎﻟﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ × ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ × ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( ‪ 55 × 280 × 400. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬ﻣﻢ )ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ × ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ × ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( ‪ 40 × 163.8 × 256.8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬ﻣﻢ )ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺧﻔﺎء(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﻲ ‪ 2.28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬ﻛﺠﻢ )ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﻲ ‪ 1.12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬ﻛﺠﻢ )ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺧﻔﺎء(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .LCD‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ 7‬ﺑﻮﺻﺎﺕ ‪TFT LCD‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪234 × 480 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ‪) CCFL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬ﻧﻮﻉ ‪(L‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪CD/DVD/VCD‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ 20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ‪ 20 -‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ 95 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﻪ ‪% 0.1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ )‪ 1‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ( ‪ 70 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪FM‬‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ 107.9 – 87.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 108 – 87.5‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ 55 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﻪ ‪% 1.0. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻟﺖ‬ ‫)‪AM (MW‬‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ 1720 – 520 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 1620 - 522‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ 45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﻪ ‪% 1.0. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ 32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻟﺖ‬ ‫‪52‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺧﻦ ﻟﻠﺪﻋﻢ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﺠﺎﻧﺎ ﻣﻦ ‪.http://www.lge.com/support/software.jsp‬‬ ‫* ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ‬ ‫* ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺷﺮﺍء ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺍﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻝ ﺟﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ؛ ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼء ﺃﻭ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻛﻴﻞ ﺇﻝ ﺟﻲ‬ ‫‪LG Electronics ESPANA S.A.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺒﺎﻧﻴﺎ‬ ‫‪LG Electronics U.K. Ltd‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻠﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ‪ /‬ﺃﻳﺮﻟﻨﺪﺍ‬ ‫‪0870 873 5454‬‬ ‫‪LG Electronics France‬‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻧﺴﺎ‬ ‫‪LG Electronics Deutschland GmbH‬‬ ‫ﺃﻟﻤﺎﻧﻴﺎ‬ ‫‪0825-826-822‬‬ ‫‪0825-825-592‬‬ ‫‪01805 4737 84‬‬ ‫‪LG Electronics Italia S.p.A‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻄﺎﻟﻴﺎ‬ ‫‪39 199600099‬‬ ‫‪LG Electronics Hellas S.A‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻧﺎﻥ‬ ‫‪LG Electronics Benelux B.V‬‬ ‫ﺑﻠﺠﻴﻜﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﻜﺴﻤﺒﻮﺭﺝ‬ ‫ﻫﻮﻟﻨﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻐﺎﺭﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﻟﻨﺪﺍ‬ ‫‪+30-210-4800-564/8‬‬ ‫‪801 11 200 900‬‬ ‫‪070-233-557‬‬ ‫‪32-70-233-557‬‬ ‫‪0900-543-5454‬‬ ‫‪36-06-40-545454‬‬ ‫‪+359-070-1-5454‬‬ ‫‪801 54 54 54‬‬ ‫‪LG Electronics Portugal, S,A‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻐﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪808-78-5454‬‬ ‫‪LG Electronics Nordic AB‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻧﻤﺎﺭﻙ‬ ‫ﻓﻨﻠﻨﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺮﻭﻳﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺴﺎ‬ ‫‪0771 41 4379‬‬ ‫‪8088 5758‬‬ ‫‪0800 116 587‬‬ ‫‪800 18 740‬‬ ‫‪420 810 555 810‬‬ ‫‪RUMANIA‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭﻣﺎﻧﻴﺎ‬ ‫‪40 31 228 3542‬‬ ‫‪CZECH REPUBLIC‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻴﻚ‬ ‫ﺳﻠﻮﻓﺎﻛﻴﺎ‬ ‫‪420 810 555 810‬‬ ‫‪421 850 111 154‬‬ ‫‪LG ELECTRONICS MAGYAR KFT‬‬ ‫‪LG Electronics Polska Sp. z.o.o‬‬ ‫‪Austria‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪902 500 234‬‬ ‫* ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼء؛ ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ‪.www.lge.com‬‬ ‫‪53‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ®‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻧﻈﺎﻣﺎً ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻻ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ‪ 10‬ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ®‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻻ ﻳﺠﻠﺐ‬ ‫ﺃﻱ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ‬ ‫®‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ Cascade‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ®‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ®‪ Bluetooth‬ﻫﻲ ﻣﻠﻚ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪Bluetooth® SIG‬‬ ‫ﻭﺃﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ LG Electronics‬ﻻﺑﺪ ﻭﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺤﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻬﻲ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺄﺻﺤﺎﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪MFL36334738 : P/NO‬‬

LG LAD-9600 Owner’s Manual

Related manuals

LG

LAD-4600

LG

DP571D

LG

LAC-M5600

LG

LPD103-A0

LG

DP372B

LG

DP582B

LG

DP382B

LG

DP482B

LG

DP472B

LG

HB994PK

Panasonic

SUR1E

LG

DP281B